2010 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the MALIBU
Emblem, and the name MALIBU are registered
trademarks of General Motors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on
your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25852253 B Second Printing
©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
WARNING:
{
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
# : Fog Lamps
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 In Brief
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Portable Audio Devices (Auxiliary Input or
USB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑25.
L. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 4‑3.
M. Horn on page 4‑3.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
C. Driver Shift Control (If Equipped). Automatic
Transmission Operation (Six Speed Transmission)
on page 3‑25 or Automatic Transmission
Operation (Four Speed Transmission) on
N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84
(If Equipped).
O. Ignition Positions on page 3‑21.
P. Climate Control System on page 4‑17 or
Automatic Climate Control System on page 4‑20.
page 3‑28
.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑26.
Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
E. Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
R. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Transmission) on page 3‑25 or
F. Instrument Panel Storage on page 3‑46.
G. Audio System(s) on page 4‑52.
Automatic Transmission Operation (Four Speed
Transmission) on page 3‑28
.
H. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑12
I. Driver Storage Compartment on page 3‑46.
J. Hood Release on page 6‑13.
.
S. Front Storage Area on page 3‑46. Accessory
Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
T. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑29
U. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7.
V. Glove Box on page 3‑45.
.
K. Cruise Control on page 4‑7. Driver Information
Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑40.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Drive Information
Press Q to lock all doors.
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold V for approximately one second to
open the trunk.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Press L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
the panic alarm.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining
doors.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press Q .
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate control system may
come on.
Door Locks
Manual Locks
From inside the vehicle slide the door lock knob to
unlock or lock a door.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are on
the front doors.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
" : Press to unlock the doors.
Q : Press to lock the doors.
For more information, see:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Door Locks on page 3‑9.
.
Turn the ignition on and then back off.
.
Power Door Locks on page 3‑10.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7.
Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE
transmitter, there is a remote release V button
located on the driver door near the map pocket.
The trunk can only be opened when the vehicle is in
P (Park), or when the ignition is off.
See Trunk on page 3‑12.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seat
On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on
the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has a
switch that controls only that window.
Press the front of the switch to open the window. Pull
the switch up to close it.
1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
For more information, see Power Windows on
page 3‑15
.
Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑4.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats (If Equipped)
Power Reclining Seatbacks
(If Equipped)
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear of the seat by moving
the front or rear of the control up or down.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑6.
See Power Seats on page 2‑5.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar Adjustment
Second Row Seats
Either side of the rear seatback can be folded down for
more cargo space.
Press the front (A) or rear (B) of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support.
See Power Lumbar on page 2‑5.
With the front seatbacks in the fully upright position,
lower the rear seatback by pulling up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
For more information see Split Folding Rear Seat on
page 2‑9
.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Safety Belt
On vehicles with heated front seats, press the top of the
switch to turn the heat feature on to the high heat
setting. The indicator light (2) will be lit.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑11.
Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat
setting. The indicator light (1) will be lit.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑16.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑25.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is
turned off.
on page 2‑43
.
For more information see: Heated Seats on page 2‑6
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not affected by this.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
To adjust the mirrors:
United States
Canada
1. Move the selector switch located below the
four-way control pad to the left or right to choose
either the driver side or passenger side mirror.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑66 for
important information.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Interior Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror will
automatically reduce the glare from the headlamps of
the vehicle behind. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is
turned to start.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3‑36.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel column. To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down or backward
or forward into a comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
See Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
To turn the dome lamps on manually, turn the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. The dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
The front reading lamps are located in the front
overhead console. The rear reading lamps are near the
dome lamp overhead near the rear passenger seats.
P: Briefly turn to this position to manually turn the
automatic lamp control off or on.
For vehicles with front and/or rear reading lamps, press
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are
closed. These lamps come on automatically when any
door is opened.
In Canada, this position only works when a vehicle is in
the P (Park) position. When the vehicle is put into
D (Drive) the lights come on.
AUTO: Automatically turns on the Daytime Running
Lamps during daytime, and the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps at night.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑12.
;: Manual operation of the parking lamps and
taillamps.
.
Entry/Exit Lighting on page 4‑13.
.
Parade Dimming on page 4‑13.
2: Manual operation of the headlamps, parking lamps,
and taillamps.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, see:
The amount of delay time varies between wiping cycles
due to the delay setting selected or the speed of the
vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased or decreased,
the wiper interval also increases or decreases.
.
Headlamps on page 4‑10.
.
Delayed Headlamps on page 4‑11.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑11.
6 : Slow wipes.
.
Automatic Headlamp System on page 4‑11.
1 : Fast wipes.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑12.
8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer: Press the button at the end of the
lever until the washers begin.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
9: Turns the wipers off.
&: For intermittent or speed sensitive operation. While
in this position, turn the x band up or down to vary
frequency.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
A. Fan Control
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
A. Fan Control
E. Air Delivery Mode
B. Air Conditioning
Control
B. Air Recirculation
C. Temperature Control
D. Outside Air
C. Air Recirculation G. Display
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Outside Air
H. Temperature Control
See Climate Control System on page 4‑17 or
Automatic Climate Control System on page 4‑20.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 : For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA
song. Song title information will be displayed on the top
line of the display while the artist information will be
displayed on the bottom line, if the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, "No Info" displays.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4‑52 and
Radio(s) on page 4‑55.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
For radios with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations
can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located
below the radio station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM™ stations.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown
O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
For radios without a FAV button, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
See Radio(s) on page 4‑55.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, refer to:
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB port or Radio with a Single CD (MP3) player:
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN.
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑55
.
2. Press O to turn the radio on.
Portable Audio Devices (Auxiliary
Input or USB Port)
3. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input jack and a
USB port, located on the audio faceplate. External
devices such as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
players, CD changers, USB storage devices, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary input jack using a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable or the USB port depending on the audio
system.
4. Press the softkey located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
5. Increase or decrease the time or date by
turning f clockwise or counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
Press the CD/AUX button to play audio from the
portable player.
page 4‑53
.
Satellite Radio
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” and “Using the
USB Port” under Radio(s) on page 4‑55.
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Wheel Controls
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
If equipped, some audio
controls can be adjusted
using the controls on the
right side of the steering
wheel.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in
the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions. For
more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑73.
e + / e − : Increases or decreases volume.
w / x : Press to change radio stations, select tracks
on a CD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an
iPod® or USB device.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than
two seconds to interact with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems.
c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑84.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Personalization
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the
DIC buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.
These features include:
The DIC display is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems and enables access to the
personalization menu.
.
Oil Life Reset
.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Units
.
RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
.
Door Lock and Unlock Settings
.
Language
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑47.
INFO: Press to scroll through the vehicle information
displays.
r : Press to reset some vehicle information displays,
select a personalization setting, or acknowledge a
warning message.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑40.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is located inside the storage bin below the
climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear of the
center storage console.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
Universal Remote System
J: On/Off.
RES+: Press to resume or accelerate speed.
SET−: Press to set or decrease speed.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
The Universal Home Remote System allows for garage
door openers, security systems, and home automation
devices to be programmed to work with these buttons in
the vehicle.
See Universal Home Remote System on page 3‑38
.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Performance and Maintenance
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The traction control system limits wheel spin. The
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold t until F
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
.
To turn off traction control, press and release t
on the instrument panel. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is displayed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43.
page 4‑43
.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
For more information, see Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑5.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5‑7.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑59 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑60.
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. The kit can be used to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6‑73 for
complete operating information.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18. The warning light will remain on
until the tire pressure is corrected.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO and reset buttons,
on the left side of the steering wheel, at the same
time to enter the personalization menu. The OIL
LIFE RESET message displays.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
3. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑22.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
Vehicles that have the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code 0) or
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K) have a yellow fuel cap
and can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8. In all other engines, use
only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline
Octane on page 6‑6.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
OnStar®
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
Online Owner Center
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
X : Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your Responsibility
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84 for more
information.
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Lift Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-64
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-72
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
WARNING:
{
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Power Lumbar
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats.
Press the front (A) or rear (B) of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support.
To adjust the seat:
.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
WARNING:
{
On vehicles with heated front seats, press the top of the
switch to turn the features on to the high heat setting.
The indicator light (2) will be lit.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat
setting. The indicator light (1) will be lit.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.
The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is
turned off.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seat.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side of
the seat behind the power seat control.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
.
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright
position.
To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
.
To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lift Seat
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat is
not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down
all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
WARNING:
{
To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that the
safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback in all
three positions.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
WARNING:
{
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
WARNING:
{
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑27
for additional information.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑32 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑35. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑31
.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑66 for more
information.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instruction on use and important safety
information.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is
not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the
vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, they will need to be replaced, and probably other
new parts for the vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on
page 2‑75
.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. If not, they are available through your dealer/
retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for some adults. When installed and properly
adjusted, the comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto
the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them
in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving
only the loop of the elastic cord exposed.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑25 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
WARNING:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑25.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
WARNING:
{
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
WARNING: (Continued)
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
WARNING:
{
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
WARNING:
{
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
(Continued)
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑43 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑66
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
(Continued)
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
C. Child restraint using
safety belt or LATCH or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. The
child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada,
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is
available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
rear anchor position has a
label, near the crease
between the seatback and
the seat cushion.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑40 for additional
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
WARNING:
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers,
behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint will be
placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
WARNING:
{
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑40. Depending on where you place the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the
LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the same time, but
you can install two of them. If you want to do this, install
one LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side
position, and install the other one either in the
WARNING:
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
driver-side position or in the center position. Refer to
the following illustration to learn which anchors to use.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle's safety belts. Instead use the vehicle's
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose the anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint , raise
it. See Head Restraints on page 2‑2.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts. See
Head Restraints on
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
page 2‑2
.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether route the tether
under the headrest or
head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts. See
Head Restraints on
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
page 2‑2
.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑40.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑43 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑43 for top tether anchor locations.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑43 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the
top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑40.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑66 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑29 for more information, including
important safety information.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑66
for additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑43 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑43 for top tether anchor locations.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
(Continued)
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑29.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑66 for more information.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑61
.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑32 or Infants and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑28 for
more information.
page 2‑35
.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger's frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger's side.
The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling
above the side windows.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
WARNING:
{
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags. See Airbag System on page 2‑56
.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended to
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined
by the location and severity of the side impact.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑61 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
WARNING:
{
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of the
airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑63.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
WARNING:
{
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑18 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑19
.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
United States
Canada
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
are visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a
distance, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF,
or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑29.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
(Continued)
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑29.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑28
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
page 2‑2
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑52.
If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in
a child restraint, secure the child restraint in a rear
seat position in the vehicle and see your dealer/
retailer.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We
recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
WARNING:
{
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
page 8‑17
.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑66.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger's position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger's
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑28 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑63. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They
can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑27 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑98
.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
WARNING:
{
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑28
.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But
the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Automatic Transmission Operation (Six Speed
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Automatic Transmission Operation (Four Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be
sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7
.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
work up to 60 m (195 feet) away from the vehicle.
Keep in mind that other conditions, such as those
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
previously stated, can impact the performance of the
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
transmitter.
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
With Remote Start Shown,
service.
Without Remote Start
Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to operate the remote start feature. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7 for additional
information.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The high‐beam headlamps, parking lamps, and back‐up
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the remote lock feedback can be programmed to have
the horn chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm
locking. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑47 for more
information.
lamps may come on each time K is pressed. See “EXT
(Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 4‑47 for additional information.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft‐deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑17
.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can be
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed is
less than 3 km/h (2 mph) or when the ignition is off.
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑17.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
Press K again within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and stay on
for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback
can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the
turn signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑47 for more information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and
the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to initiate
the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again
to cancel the panic alarm.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer/
retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is
programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB
BATT (Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑43 for additional information.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle's heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate the
inside temperature. Normal operation of these systems
will return after the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter's
remote start button for about four seconds or until
the vehicle's turn signal lamps flash. The doors
will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension. The
first start must expire or be canceled to get two
separate 10 minute starts.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes from the time you repeat the steps for
remote starting. The remote start running time can be
extended one time and only after the first remote start.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for additional
information.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle's
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑34.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
.
.
.
.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑47 for additional
information.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started two times, or one time
with a time extension, the vehicle's ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again. See Ignition Positions on
page 3‑21 for information regarding the ignition
positions on your vehicle.
Remote Start Ready
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
.
The remote start system is disabled through
manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature.
the DIC.
.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
The vehicle's key is in the ignition.
.
The vehicle's hood is open.
.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
Door Locks
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
WARNING:
{
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle is
driven.
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, turn the key in the driver's door lock
counterclockwise to lock the door and clockwise to
unlock it or use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
(Continued)
From the inside, move the manual lock control on the
door or use the power door lock switch.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all of the doors will lock. To cancel the delay
and lock the doors immediately, press the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power
door lock switch a second time. The theft deterrent
system will arm after 30 seconds.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches on the front doors
can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
The vehicle is programmed to lock all doors
automatically when the following are met:
A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message will
display if one of the doors is not fully closed. This
happens when the ignition is on and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑43.
.
All doors are closed.
.
The ignition is on.
Delayed Locking
.
The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors
and arming of the theft-deterrent system for
five seconds when the power door lock switch or
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle.
This feature cannot be disabled.
All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park).
The power door unlock function can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑47
.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Door Security Locks
Lockout Protection
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the
inside.
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and then the driver's door will unlock. Be sure to
remove the key from the ignition when locking your
vehicle.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
If the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock
the doors while the key is in the ignition, a chime will
sound three times. All doors will then lock.
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened
from the outside with the door unlocked. To return the
door to normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical
position.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk
WARNING: (Continued)
Press the trunk release button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter for one second to open the
trunk from the outside.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
WARNING:
{
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
(Continued)
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Trunk Assist Handle
Press the button located
There is an assist handle
located on the inside of
the trunk.
on the driver door near
the map pocket to open
the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is in
P (Park) or when the ignition is off.
Use the assist handle to lower the trunk lid. The TRUNK
AJAR message will appear if the trunk is not properly
closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑43 for more information.
Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-down
or anchor point when securing items in the trunk
may damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only to
help you close the trunk lid.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch. This
handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
The power window switches are located on the armrest
on the driver's door. In addition, there is a switch on
each passenger door.
Express-Down Window
The driver window has an express-down feature. This
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way
down and release, to automatically lower.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull and
hold the front of the switch.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Up Window
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate the
express-up feature. To stop the window as it is going
up, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express‐up is active, the window stops at the
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a preset factory
position. Weather conditions such as severe icing may
also cause the window to auto‐reverse. The window
returns to normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, the driver power
window will need to be re-programmed for the
express-up feature to work. Replace or recharge the
vehicle's battery before reprogramming.
Express Window Anti‐Pinch Override
WARNING:
{
To program the driver window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active, close all doors.
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all
people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window
is fully closed.
In an emergency, the anti‐pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The
window rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re‐activated.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout
The driver power window controls also include a lockout
button.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to stop
the rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver and front passenger can still operate all the
windows with the lock on. When the red part of the
switch is visible, you have returned to normal window
operation.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and swing
them to the side, to block out glare from the side.
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver's side visor. When
you lift the cover, the light will turn on.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are
closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a
door is open. When the open door is closed, the system
will arm.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
flashes once every three seconds.
How the System Alarm is Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
.
Open the driver's door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a thirty
second full alarm of horn and lights.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
.
Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights
will immediately sound for thirty seconds.
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
.
Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, it will activate the full alarm.
If you do not want to arm the content theft system, lock
the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors or
with the inside power door lock switches.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if
any door is opened while armed.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
To turn off the system alarm:
.
Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The
system will then re-arm itself.
.
Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
.
Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
.
Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
This will also disarm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
.
Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button
is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the
content theft security system alarm was previously
triggered.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try
again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses on
page 6‑105. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/
retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a
new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
page 8‑7
.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however, is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑27 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, the vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and windshield wipers while the
engine is not running.
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights. The switch will stay in this position
while the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be
applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to the ON/RUN position for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission. The key can only be removed in
LOCK/OFF.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will slow down as
the engine warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
Heated Seats (if equipped)
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will
work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver door is
opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat
these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which
will prevent engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
WARNING:
{
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. On
the 2.4L engine, the engine coolant heater cord is
located near the air cleaner box on the passenger
side of the engine compartment. On the 3.5L and
3.6L V6 engines, the engine coolant heater cord is
located on the driver side around the battery box.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Transmission)
WARNING:
{
The automatic
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
transmission has a shift
lever located on the
console between the
seats.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑32. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑27.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal then press the shift lever button
before you can shift from P (Park) while the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all
the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park on page 3‑33.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
.
Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
page 5‑17
.
.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
M (Manual Mode): This position, allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission. If the vehicle
has this feature, see Driver Shift Control (DSC).
WARNING:
{
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) in the instrument
cluster will change from the currently displayed
message to the letter “M”, For Manual position, and a
number indicating the requested gear range when
moving the shift lever forward or rearward.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
While using the DSC feature the transmission will have
firmer shifting and sportier performance. You can use
this for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in
gear longer or to downshift for more power or engine
braking.
While driving in manual mode, the transmission will
remain in the driver selected gear. When coming to
a stop in the manual position, the vehicle will
automatically shift into 1 (First) gear.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (RPM):
.
The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear if the vehicle speed or engine
RPM is too low.
.
The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed or engine RPM is
too high.
2. Press the + (plus) paddle located on top of the
steering wheel controls forward to upshift, or push
the backside of the shift paddle rearward to
downshift.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Second or Third Gear Start Feature
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission)
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and
icy conditions, you may want to shift the gear select tap
switch into Second or Third gear. A higher gear allows
you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.
The automatic
transmission has a shift
lever located on the
console between the
seats.
With the DSC feature, the vehicle can be set to pull
away in Second or Third gear.
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) into the
M (Manual Mode).
2. With the vehicle stopped, press (+) end of the
button to select Second or Third gear. The vehicle
will start from a stop position in Second or
Third gear.
3. Once moving select the desired drive gear.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from P (Park) when the
ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push the
shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out
of Park on page 3‑33.
WARNING:
{
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑32. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑27.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑17
.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle that way, you
could damage the transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in L2 (Low) when
you are driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and
D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.
WARNING:
{
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this
position can be used to prevent repetitive types of
shifts. You might choose I (Intermediate) instead of
D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads and when
towing a trailer, so that there is less shifting between
gears.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
L (Low): This position gives you access to 4 (Fourth),
3 (Third), 2 (Second) and 1 (First) gear ranges. This
provides more engine braking but lower fuel economy
than D (Drive). You can use it on very steep hills, or in
deep snow or mud. If the electronic range select is put
in L (Low), the transmission will not shift into lower
gears until the vehicle is going slow enough.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
.
Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also display in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) as a reminder to
release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑43.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is on,
the brake system warning
light will come on. See
Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑30.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑27.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you
feel the pedal release. If the parking brake is not
released when you begin to drive, the brake system
warning light comes on and a chime sounds as a
warning that the parking brake is still on.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
page 5‑27
.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31 for more
information.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake
is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pushing the button.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in P (Park).
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the
gear you wish.
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then
it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park).
To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park” listed
previously.
Parking Over Things That Burn
WARNING:
{
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to apply the brake pedal then
press the shift lever button before you can shift from
P (Park). See Automatic Transmission Operation
(Six Speed Transmission) on page 3‑25 or Automatic
Transmission Operation (Four Speed Transmission) on
page 3‑28
.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
(Continued)
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
WARNING:
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑32.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5‑27.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Mirrors
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push
the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system and
how to subscribe to OnStar®. See the OnStar® owner
guide for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Compass
Compass Operation
Press O to turn the compass display on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass displays the current compass direction after a
few seconds.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass display and OnStar®
controls. See your dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See
the OnStar® owner's guide for more information about
the services OnStar® provides.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance:
Compass Calibration
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C
appears in the compass window, the compass may
need to be reset or calibrated.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle very
slowly, in circles, until the display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight. It is necessary to adjust
the compass to compensate for compass variance if the
vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, such as a long distance, cross-country
trip, it is necessary to adjust the compass variance.
2. Press and hold O until a zone number displays.
3. Once the zone number displays, press O
repeatedly until the correct zone number is
reached. If C appears in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Outside Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Automatic Climate
Control System on page 4‑20 for more information.
Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located below the
four-way control pad to the left or right to choose
either the driver side or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is
being programmed.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing this button,
complete the following steps in less than
30 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what
was used for the garage door opener.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
the original hand held transmitter is not available.
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of
the garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
.
When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
.
When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into
the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure
to enter the switch settings written down in
Step 2, in order from left to right, into the
Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
.
A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
.
A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
.
A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need to
be held for up to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the
garage door opener.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
.
If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Pull the handle up to open.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
Cupholders
Removable cupholders are located in front of the center
console. See “Center Console Storage Area” following
for how to access them. Press and hold the tab at the
rear of the cupholders and lift up and rearward to
remove the cupholders. This will disengage the two
forward tabs.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To reinstall them, place the two forward tabs into the
slots and push the rear of the cupholder down.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
For vehicles with rear seat cupholders, pull down the
door on the back of the center console to access them.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release
both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be
erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The armrest on top of the center console can be
adjusted to a rearward, middle, and forward position.
Pull or push the front of the armrest to adjust to the
desired position.
Instrument Panel Storage
An instrument panel storage area, with a removable
liner, is located above the radio. Slide the latch toward
the back of the vehicle to open the storage area.
Another storage area is located in front of the main
storage. Push down and then forward on the rear of the
cover to access. There is a storage tray and removable
cupholders.
Front Storage Area
A storage area is located in front of the shift lever.
Push the bottom of the door and the storage will
automatically open.
Driver Storage Compartment
A driver storage compartment is located near the left
side of the steering column on the bottom of the
instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open. Pull out
to remove for cleaning.
Center Console Storage
The center console storage area has a storage tray and
a main storage. Pull up on the driver side latch to
access the storage tray. Pull up on the passenger side
latch to access the main storage. There is a removable
divider and may be a storage pocket located at the rear
of the center console.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and release the back of the switch to open the
sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position,
press and release the back of the switch to
Sunroof
On vehicles with a
express-open the sunroof. To stop the sunroof from
express opening, press the switch again. If the
sunshade is closed, it will open automatically when the
sunroof opens past the vented position.
sunroof, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the map lamps.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof is
closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑22.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the sliding
glass panel may cause damage and the sunroof
may not operate properly. Always close the glass
panel before closing the sunshade.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current . . . . . . 4-16
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps Off in Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-25
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-31
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . 4-33
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel be
adjusted.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down or backward
or forward into a comfortable position.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel column.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane change is
complete.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the following:
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
O : Exterior Lamp Control
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Flash-to-Pass.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses on page 6‑105.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets the high-beam headlamps be used to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you until
the high-beam headlamps come on, then release the
lever to turn them off.
Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. While in this
position, turn the x band up or down to vary
frequency.
The amount of delay time varies between wiping cycles
due to the delay setting selected or the speed of the
vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased or decreased,
the wiper interval also increases or decreases.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the lever down, then
release it. Several wipes, hold the lever down.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
WARNING:
{
If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw
them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the
snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume the
previous speed.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle's headlamps turn on
automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more be maintained without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING:
{
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
WARNING:
{
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the
steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster also
goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To
return to the previously set speed, you do not need to
repeat the set process again. Once at a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+.
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen
speed and stays there.
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
.
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) or Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5‑7 and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 5‑5. When road conditions allow, the
cruise control can be used again.
speed is reached and then release the button.
.
To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle's speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle's speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed.
When the brakes are applied this ends the cruise
control.
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
.
Push and hold the SET− until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle's
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previously set cruise control
speed.
Step lightly on the brake pedal to disengage the
cruise control.
.
Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruise
control.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition are turned off.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn on the
Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this position
only works when a vehicle is in the P (Park) position.
Headlamps
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to
off/on again. This is a momentary control switch that
springs back when released. The Automatic Headlamp
System always turns on at the beginning of an ignition
cycle.
Headlamps on Reminder
If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is turned
off while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime will
sound.
The band on the lever located on the left side of the
steering column, operates the exterior lamps.
Headlamps Off in Park
The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps off
when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights on,
turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime,
and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at
night.
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,
then the headlamps automatically turn off.
The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not
in P (Park).
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights are
not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the
parking lamp position.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction lever
up one position and then back to AUTO.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when they are needed.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first
sold in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of
the instrument panel that controls the DRL. Do not
cover this sensor or the head lamps will be on when
they are not needed.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal
brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument panel
lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system. Do
not cover the sensor or the automatic headlamp system
will turn on when it is not needed.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
.
The ignition is on.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only be
affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than this delay.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
.
The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
only position (This applies only to vehicles that are
first sold in Canada).
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps turn off while the high-beam headlamps
are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
page 4‑12
.
Instrument Panel Brightness
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch
to the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the transmission must stay in P (Park) for this function.
The knob with this symbol
is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering
column.
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button for this feature is
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on or off. An indicator
light comes on when the fog lamps are on.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, press
the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are
closed. These lamps come on automatically when any
door is opened.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is
opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the unlock
symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to
provide light as you exit.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Parade Dimming
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the
day. It prevents the display lights and indicator lights
from being dim, while the parking lamps are used during
the day.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a battery run-down protection feature
designed to protect the vehicle's battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visor vanity)
is left on while the ignition is turned off, the battery
run-down protection system will automatically shut the
lamp(s) off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining the
battery.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
.
Turn on the ignition.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER
ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW
BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
.
Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on.
.
Open a door.
.
Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
button (if equipped).
.
Press the remote trunk release button.
.
Press the power door lock switch.
The battery run-down feature will also be activated
when any door on the vehicle is left open and the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
on page 4‑43
.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is located inside the storage bin below the
climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear of the
center storage console.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied to
the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition
is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into the
outlet.
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
The vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used
to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum
limit of 150 watts.
If you try to connect equipment using more than
150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection
circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off
and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑22. The power restarts when
equipment that operates within the limit is plugged into
the outlet and a system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is
located on the rear of the
center console.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power outlet:
.
Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power
tools.
.
Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in
use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN
and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged
into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
When it is cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use the
engine coolant heater, if vehicle has one, to provide
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An engine coolant
heater warms the coolant the engine uses that provides
heat to warm the inside of the vehicle. For more
information, see Engine Coolant Heater on page 3‑23.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan must be
on to run the air-conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
A. Fan Control
E. Air Delivery Mode
Control
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air will be directed toward
the side windows.
B. Recirculation
C. Temperature Control
D. Outside Air
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window Defogger
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the windshield and side window outlets.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor
outlets, with some air directed to the side windows.
When this mode is selected, the system automatically
turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The air-conditioning compressor
operates although the indicator light is not on. The
air-conditioning indicator light turns off when defog is
selected. If the air-conditioning button is pressed while
in defog mode, the indicator light will turn on. If the
button is pressed again, the light will turn off. The
recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select 0 .
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show it
is on.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned off
is normal.
Maximum Air Conditioning
1 (Defrost): This mode quickly clears the windshield
of fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield with
some air directed to the floor vents. In this mode,
outside air is pulled into the vehicle. The
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the air
conditioning system operate more efficiently.
air-conditioning compressor will not run unless the
outside temperature is at or below freezing. The
air-conditioning compressor operates although the
indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning indicator
light turns off when defrost is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode,
the indicator light turns on. If the button is pressed
again, the light turns off. Recirculation cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the C vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select # air conditioning.
4. Select the ? recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
can cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
< REAR: Press to turn the rear window defogger on or
off. An indicator light comes on to show that the rear
window defogger is on. Be sure to clear as much snow
from the rear window as possible.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is on. Air
from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout the
vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with all
modes, but it cannot be used with the recirculation
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger only runs for
about seven minutes before turning off. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
mode. Press : to cancel the recirculation mode.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is
on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The
recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you try to
use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot function.
If the vehicle's speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors heat when the rear window defogger
is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3‑38.
Pressing this button cancels the outside air mode.
When switching to the defog or defrost modes the
system automatically moves from recirculation to
outside air. When the vehicle or fan is turned off
and back on, the system defaults to outside air
automatically. Only use recirculation mode when it is
needed for comfort, since window fogging can occur.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
Automatic Climate Control System
For vehicles with the remote start feature, when it is
activated the climate control system heats or cools the
inside of the vehicle using the modes that were set
before the vehicle was turned off. The climate control
knobs will remain active during a remote start. However,
the climate control buttons will be inactive until the
ignition is turned on by the key. If the fan is off, the
climate control system will not operate during remote
start. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 3‑4.
For vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling, and
ventilation can be automatically controlled.
A. Fan Control
B. Air Conditioning
C. Recirculation
D. Outside Air
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Display
H. Temperature Control
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the temperature.
Automatic Operation
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan
speed control and the air delivery mode control knobs
to activate the automatic system. When automatic
operation is active the system controls the inside
temperature and air delivery.
Press w or x to adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C)
the system remains at the maximum cooling
setting. If the temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the
system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting does not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
To place the system in automatic mode do the following:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the AUTO
position.
The current set temperature displays. When
AUTO is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet is automatically controlled. The air
conditioning compressor runs while the outside
temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet
will normally be set to outside air. If it is hot
outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down the
vehicle.
Do not to cover the sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on the
intensity of the sun.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as this
regulates the inside temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold
weather, the system delays turning on the fan until
warm air is available. The length of delay depends
on the engine coolant temperature. Turning the fan
knob overrides this delay and changes the fan to
the selected speed.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog or
frost more quickly. The system automatically controls
the fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, the air conditioning compressor automatically
runs to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
The air conditioning indicator light blinks three times if
the compressor is turned off while in this mode.
Manual Operation
9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knob to turn off
the entire climate control system. Outside air still enters
the vehicle. The airflow direction and temperature can
be adjusted.
x / w Temperature Control: Press the arrows to
increase or decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press turn the air conditioning
on and off. An indicator light turns on to show the air
conditioning is on.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed.
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
in the vehicle.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closed for
the air conditioner to work its best.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air
to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel
outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, press the
temperature buttons to the desired setting.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the side window outlets.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield
outlets.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system maximizes its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
vehicle. The recirculation indicator light blinks three
times if you try to use recirculation in a mode in which it
cannot function.
Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculation
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system
reverts to the auto recirculation function.
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation of
the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,
The recirculation mode cannot be used with the floor,
defrost, or defog modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns
off to indicate that this is not allowed. This is to prevent
window fogging.
press x or w to the desired temperature setting.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and
press x or w to adjust the temperature.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show it is on. Air from
outside the vehicle will circulate throughout the vehicle.
The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but it
cannot be used with the recirculation mode. Pressing
this button cancels the recirculation mode.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of time can
cause fogging of the vehicle's windows. To clear the
fog, select either defog or defrost. Make sure the air
conditioning is on. Allow the air conditioning to run
automatically to help dehumidify the air.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light above the button comes on
to show it is on. This mode recirculates and helps to
quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to
help prevent outside air and odors from entering the
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
Rear Window Defogger
For vehicles with remote start, when it is activated the
climate control system heats and cools the inside of the
vehicle using the previous system settings before the
vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
remain active during a remote start. However, the
climate control buttons will be inactive until the ignition
is turned on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate
control system will not operate during remote start.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or
off. An indicator light comes on to show that the rear
window defogger is on.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press the
button again.
With the automatic climate control system, the climate
control displays “RS” in place of the temperature to
indicate that remote start is activated. For best
performance, turn both the fan and mode knobs to
AUTO. If the temperature is cold enough and the mode
knob is set to AUTO, the system begins in defrost to
clear the windows. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4.
If the vehicle's speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
For vehicles with heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors will also heat when the rear window
defogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on
page 3‑38
.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by
moving it either up and down or side-to-side, to change
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
.
Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as
they could adversely affect the performance of the
system.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle
more effectively.
.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to
prevent the odor from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system. This can be helpful when
driving through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this mode in cold or
cool weather can cause window fogging.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Base version shown, Canada Similar
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The safety belt light
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is
not possible, then it must be set at zero and a label
must be put on the driver door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the odometer was last reset.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4‑40 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING:
{
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑56.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑43 for more information.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑66 for important
safety information. The instrument panel has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
WARNING:
{
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for
on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or
off symbol to let you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑28
for more information, including important safety
information.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both parts
need to be working.
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show it is
working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release . If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it
means there is a brake problem.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑43 for more information.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
carefully stop. The brake pedal may be harder to push
or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take
longer to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle
one or two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
page 5‑24
.
WARNING:
{
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑30.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in
maintaining directional control of the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears, the
system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system or
the Traction Control
System (TCS) indicator/
warning light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑5
and Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 for
more information.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light goes off.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43 for
more information on the messages associated with this
light.
If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,
this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or
are disabled.
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is no
longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system
is not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light goes off.
United States
Canada
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the pointer moves towards the H (United States) or to
the shaded thermostat symbol area (Canada), the
engine is too hot.
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑31
.
The vehicle's engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never
drive with the engine coolant temperature warning
light on.
A temperature indicator light turns on and a chime
sounds.
The vehicle is operated under normal driving conditions
and the temperature indicator light comes on, pull off
the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑31 for
more information.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑60 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑40 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑57
for more information.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑3.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can
prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
the Tank on page 6‑10. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
WARNING:
{
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system. The
vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7 for more
information.
Highbeam On Light
Security Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑17
.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with
the fuel gauge:
Fuel Gauge
.
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the fuel tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the fuel
tank's capacity to fill it.
.
The indicator moves a little while turning a corner
or speeding up.
.
The gauge goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge shows much fuel
is left in the fuel tank. When the indicator nears empty,
a message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑43 for more information. The vehicle still has a
little fuel left, but the vehicle should be fueled soon. An
arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons to
enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑47 for more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The
DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle's systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature
The outside air temperature will be displayed at the
same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer. The
temperature outside of the vehicle will be displayed in
either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
The outside air temperature appears on the left side of
the DIC display and the odometer, or trip odometer,
appears on the right side of the display.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Odometer
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer displays. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi). It is based on fuel economy and the fuel
remaining in the tank.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW
displays.
page 4‑47
.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. The
FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
Trip Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature along with A or B displays. These modes
show the current distance traveled since the last reset
for each trip odometer in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi). Both odometers can be used at the
same time.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg)
your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is
continually updated each time you drive.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑19 and Scheduled Maintenance on
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or
miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike average fuel economy,
this screen cannot be reset.
page 7‑3
.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑22.
Tire Pressure
AV (Average) SPEED
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per square inch (psi). Press
the information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF
displays for the front tires. Press the information button
again until LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear
tires.
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle's average speed in
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil's
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system is
reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to add air
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑57 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑43 for more information.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE FLUID
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑30 for
more information. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle's systems.
A message clears when the vehicle's condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off
and back on. With most messages, a warning chime
sounds when the message displays. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑22
Engine Oil on page 6‑19, and Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3 for more information.
,
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch. See
Automatic Headlamp System on page 4‑11 for more
information.
CHECK GAS CAP
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it is
on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See
Automatic Headlamp System on page 4‑11 for more
information.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CRUISE ENGAGED
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
This message displays when the cruise control system
is active. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7 for more
information.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel
or hear the system working and see this message
displayed in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist
when this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message may stay on for a few
seconds after ESC stops assisting you with directional
control of the vehicle. This is normal when the system is
operating. See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 5‑5 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light
on page 4‑32 for more information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle's
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer immediately.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
This message displays when the vehicle's engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑5 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑32 for
more information.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑32 for
more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle's windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
POWER STEERING
page 3‑4
.
On some vehicles, this message displays if a problem
has been detected with the electric power steering.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 4‑39, Fuel on page 6‑5, and Filling
the Tank on page 6‑10 for more information.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31 for more
information.
LOW TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly. This message stays on for a
few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 and
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and a chime sounds when the
system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑32 for more
information. Have the system serviced by your dealer/
retailer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on page 5‑5 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑32 for more
information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then
back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑34. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑60 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR
TRUNK AJAR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle's tires is low on air. The low
tire pressure warning light also comes on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑34. If this message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 3‑12 for more
information.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
Loading Information label. See Tires on page 6‑48
,
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18, and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑57. The DIC also shows the tire
pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑40
.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑7 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 4‑32 for
more information.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑22. See “OIL LIFE” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑40 for more
information.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to
enter the personalization menu.
UNITS
If the vehicle speed is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the
available settings for each mode.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When
REMOTE START appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
UNLOCK HORN
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
This feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or
disabled. When UNLOCK HORN appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7 for more
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
LOCK HORN
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature, which allows the vehicle's horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will
still chirp on the second press.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior hazard/
turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock,
or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter a second time.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
See Power Door Locks on page 3‑10, Delayed Locking
on page 3‑10, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on
page 3‑10 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver's door will automatically unlock.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You
will need to manually unlock the doors.
This feature, which allows the vehicle's exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT
LIGHTS appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on
page 3‑10 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
UNLK (Unlock)
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 for more information.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
WARNING:
{
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of
the following conditions occur:
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
A ten second time period has elapsed.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
.
The ignition is turned off.
radio stations.
.
The end of the personalization menu list is
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
reached.
page 5‑2
.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Setting the Clock
Without Date Display
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player
To set the time:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the
display. Press H a second time and the minute
begins flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
page 6‑3
.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑22 for more information.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn
the f knob to the desired option to select the setting.
Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the
screen time out.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
With Date Display
date press H while the radio is on. The date with
display times out after a few seconds and goes back to
the normal radio and time display.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
To set the time and date:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the
following:
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or let
the screen time out.
.
Press the softkey located below the
selected tab.
.
Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
.
Turn f clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
following:
.
Press © SEEK or s REV.
.
Turn f counterclockwise.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio
with CD (MP3) similar
Radio with CD (Base)
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when
the information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
display. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base).
Press to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on
the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, or the Radio
with CD (MP3).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios
with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is consistent.
signal in the selected band.
.
To seek stations, press and release © SEEK to
go to the previous station and stay there.
.
To scan stations, press and hold © SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
goes to the next station. Press © SEEK again to
stop scanning.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
4 (Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD
(Base), press to change the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,
and hold © SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
press 4 to display the time.
stored preset. Press © SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA
song. Song title information will be displayed on the top
line of the display while the artist information will be
displayed on the bottom line, it the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available, “No Info” displays.
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
signal in the selected band.
.
To seek stations, press and release ¨ SEEK to
go to the next station and stay there.
.
To scan stations, press and hold ¨ SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
Storing Radio Stations
goes to the next station. Press ¨ SEEK again to
stop scanning.
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
.
To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
and hold ¨ SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
stored preset. Press ¨ SEEK again to stop
scanning preset stations.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six
favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are
also stored with the favorite stations.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen showing the radio
station frequency tabs and to begin programming
favorites.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available for
the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired
levels.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the
radio display.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be
stored as a favorite.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information is
longer than what can be displayed, the extra information
will page every three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3):
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
stations as presets.
1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations (six
FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on the
six numbered buttons.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted.
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange,
or treble:
To store preset stations:
.
1. Tune in the desired station.
Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons
for three seconds until a beep sounds.
.
Turn f clockwise.
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange,
or treble:
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered
button.
.
Press © SEEK, or s REV.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS,
MID, and TREB.
.
Turn f counterclockwise.
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey
below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with
CD (Base):
Press f until the tone control labels display, then
turn f to change the setting.
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
If a station's frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To adjust balance or fade using ` :
1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display.
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker
or treble by pressing f .
control label displays.
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can also
be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow, \
FWD, or s REV.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the Balance/
Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade
to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the
BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio
beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust balance or fade using f :
1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab,
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
or continue pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f
for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station (XM
Satellite Radio Service Only)
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.
To select and find a desired category:
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the
radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category, do one of the
following:
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
.
Turn f .
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer for service.
.
Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
.
Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Playing a CD
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track,
if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑72 for more
information.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
Loading a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm (3 in) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Ejecting a CD
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
To use random:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
.
The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is in the
player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
A problem may have occurred while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 4‑65 for
more information.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Care of CDs
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a
CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is
not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into
the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device
such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input
jack for use as another audio source.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the CD
if a description is needed.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is connected to the auxiliary input. The
portable audio device continues playing until it is
stopped or turned off.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary
input. Press again and the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
may display.
Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the
USB port.
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated
using the latest iTunes® application. See
www.apple.com/itunes.
Using the USB Port
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
www.apple.com/support.
Radio's with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 on page 4‑65 for information about
how to connect and control a USB storage device or
an iPod.
Using an MP3
Format
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3's can
play .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play
.mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage
device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
Compressed Audio
.
USB Flash Drives
The radio can play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files.
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
The CD player reads all MP3 files first, then the
uncompressed CD audio files.
.
iPod nanos
.
iPod touch
.
iPod classic
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File and Folder
Root Directory
Structure
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
The radio supports:
.
Up to 50 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Empty Folder
.
Up to 50 playlists.
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
.
Up to 255 files.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
Order of Play
.
Files with an .mp3 or .cda file extension.
Tracks are played in the following order:
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
The radio supports:
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Up to 700 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
FAT16
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
FAT32
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File System and Naming
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
Preprogrammed Playlists
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume
and the elapsed time of the file displays.
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there is
no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Release s REV to resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to
advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey
below S c to go to the first track in the previous
folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order. To use random:
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
1. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs from the
current CD in random order.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
2. Press the same softkey again to turn off
random play.
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
below h to have the files played in order by artist or
album. The player scans the disc to sort the files by
artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of
files on the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is
scanning in the background.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located on the front of the radio.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located on
the front of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo
may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the
radio's display. The iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. To
browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below c .
To use the softkeys:
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
folder.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's
menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
.
Playlists
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
.
.
.
.
.
softkey is pressed.
Artists
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
Albums
Genres
Songs
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
Composers
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
To select files:
Repeat Functionality
1. Press the softkey below h .
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press f to select the desired menu.
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuffle Functionality
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Bluetooth®
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Recognition
Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and
name tags.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑84 for more
information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
b g (Push To Talk) : Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the
volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
.
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
.
.
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Paired Phone
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
.
Store
delete followed by a tone.
.
Digit Store
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes
or No” followed by a tone.
.
Directory
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Linking to a Different Phone
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
.
If the system recognizes the number it
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the
phone number.
.
If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
.
If another phone is not found, the original
phone remains connected.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re‐entered.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Digit Store Command
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
.
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The
system responds with “No. OK, let's try again,
please say the name tag.”
Deleting Name Tags
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
.
Delete
To use the delete all name tags command:
.
Delete all name tags
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
.
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
.
.
.
Dial
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
Digit Dial
Call
Re‐dial
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by
a tone.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
number.
.
If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
number.
will repeat them.
.
If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re‐entered.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Call Command
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The system responds
with “Re‐dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for
the name tag to be re‐entered.
.
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
.
Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
.
Press b g again to return to the original call.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
Three‐Way Calling
Three‐Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.
Transferring a Call
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
Audio can be transferred between the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
the callers together.
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Ending a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Press c x to end a call.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
Sending a Number During a Call
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
.
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
Other Information
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call
continues.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for FCC
information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select tracks on a CD:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the
track.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
steering wheel.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold w to play the highlighted
track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous
folder list.
To change radio stations:
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
.
Press and release w or x to go to the next or
the list.
previous radio station stored as a preset.
.
To select a folder, press and hold w when the
folder is highlighted.
.
Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
.
To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold x .
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
FM Stereo
current call.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth® or OnStar® systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4‑73 and
the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
Cellular Phone Usage
AM
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's
battery, or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is received while listening
to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Antenna
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post on
the glass.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Chime Level Adjustment
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle's chime
level. If the radio can be used to change the volume
level of the chime, press and hold the sixth numbered
pushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level changes
between Normal and Loud. The selected volume level
appears on the radio display.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑11.
WARNING:
{
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑30.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of
heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
page 4‑31
.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on,
and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑40.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate , but this is normal.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system is
both on and activated.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will not
assist the driver in maintaining directional control of the
vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43.
The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system which combines antilock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on. But, ESC can be turned off if
needed.
When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working. This is normal and does
not mean there is a problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the vehicle reaches
32 km/h (20 mph).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
ESC message will be displayed.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control of
the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
system may be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑17.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will
be on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for
service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑43 for more information.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both
traction control and ESC, press and hold the button
briefly.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3 for more information.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver that
both traction control and ESC are disabled.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When this light is on solid
and either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is
displayed, the system will
not limit wheel spin.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much or
are beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power by closing the throttle and managing engine
spark to limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑43 for more information.
This light will flash when
the traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑17.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but
this is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message are
displayed.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located on the
center console.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it
is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do not
have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book for
additional information.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when the button is pressed.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management) and
by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. For
more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑40.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
may be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3 for more information.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brake
warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the
differential could be damaged. The repairs would
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Power Steering
Steering
If the vehicle has the hydraulic power steering system
and power steering assist is lost because the engine
stops or the power steering system is not functioning,
the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
Electric Power Steering
If the vehicle has the electric power steering system
and the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able
to stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost
because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take
more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal steering movements.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service
repairs. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑43
.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because
there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels. See
Braking on page 5‑3. It is better to remove as much
speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the
braking skid.
Driving at Night
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If the traction control system
is off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
.
Watch for animals.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
WARNING:
{
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Highway Hypnosis
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Other driving tips include:
Pass with caution.
.
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
and to the sides.
on page 6‑48
.
.
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
Turn off cruise control.
often.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
Things to check on your own include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
clean — inside and outside?
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
system, and transmission.
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
lower gear.
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
WARNING:
{
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
WARNING:
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
WARNING: (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7
.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
.
page 4‑3
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
WARNING:
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
WARNING: (Continued)
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑18.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
WARNING:
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑71.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑24.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory‐installed
options. Two labels on the vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 6‑48 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Tire and Loading Information Label
page 6‑57
.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle,
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information label
lists the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity for your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5‑27 for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
453 kg
Item
Total
453 kg
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
A
A
(1,000 lbs)
(1,000 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 68 kg
(150 lbs) × 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 68 kg
(150 lbs) × 5 =
B
C
136 kg (300 lbs)
317 kg (700 lbs)
B
C
340 kg (750 lbs)
113 kg (250 lbs)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed the
vehicle's maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
453 kg
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
A
(1,000 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 91 kg
(200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
B
C
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the driver side center pillar.
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongue
weight if pulling a trailer.
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle's
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle.
WARNING:
{
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
WARNING:
{
.
Put things in the cargo area of the
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far
forward as you can. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages,
or anything else are put inside the vehicle, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
.
What's the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Towing Your Vehicle
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8‑7.
.
How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
.
Does the vehicle have the proper towing
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
Recreational Vehicle Towing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑14.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake.
Dinghy Towing
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following fuse
from the instrument panel fuse block:
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for
about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 6‑105 for more information.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the
destination has been reached.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four
wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground
and the front wheels on a dolly:
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and a
dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
WARNING:
{
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight
of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1600 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, transmission or other parts could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for the safety of the driver and the
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
.
.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle's parts.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature
is above 100°F (38°C).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
the weight of the trailer,
.
the weight of the trailer tongue
.
.
and the total weight on the vehicle's tires.
There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must
be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for
more information.
Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here are
some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you
will be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
.
Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then
be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 3‑34 in the Index for more
information.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by
itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
WARNING:
{
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving on Grades
If parking the rig on a hill:
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle's speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑31.
5. Release the brake pedal.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
.
start the engine,
on page 6‑31
.
.
shift into a gear, and
.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
release the parking brake.
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer, be
sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is
a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . 6-45
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage . . . . . . 6-80
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . 6-104
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑73.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
WARNING:
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑72.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
Maintenance Record on page 7‑15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑103.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code 0) or
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 6‑8. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on
possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑7 for additional
information.
page 6‑6
.
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B), the
2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code 0), the 3.5L V6 engine
(VIN Code K), or the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code N), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of
87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, an
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs
service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑34. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of
87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing, you
could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded
gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible
knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock,
might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for those
fuels.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit‐related problems.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑103.
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code 0) or
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6‑5. In all other
engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
under Gasoline Octane on page 6‑6.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Only vehicles that have the 2.4L L4 engine
(VIN Code 0) or the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the
use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The
ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made
from renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not
to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add
as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
11 L (three gallons) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
11 km (seven miles) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using
E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
Tank on page 6‑10.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
WARNING:
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Turn the tethered fuel cap counterclockwise to remove.
If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be
yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6‑8. While refueling,
hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
The fuel cap is behind the fuel door is on the vehicle's
passenger side. To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release and it will open.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fit
properly. This can cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few
seconds before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑98.
on page 4‑34
.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the
CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap is
not properly installed.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING:
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{
WARNING:
{
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
WARNING:
{
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle to
the left of the steering
column.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower
the hood until the lifting force of the strut is
reduced, then release the hood to latch fully.
Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat
the process if necessary.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑24.
B. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6‑26
.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑36.
page 6‑26
.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑19.
H. See Battery on page 6‑39.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 6‑19.
page 6‑35
J. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
page 6‑108
.
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑27
.
.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3.5LV6 engine, this is what you see:
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑24.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑36.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑33.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap/Dipstick (Out of
View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 6‑26
.
page 6‑26
.
J. See Battery on page 6‑39.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑19.
K. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
page 6‑108
.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑19.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant
page 6‑35
.
on page 6‑27
.
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6‑26
.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3.6LV6 engine, this is what you see:
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑24.
Engine Oil
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑33.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑19.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑19.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See
Cooling System on page 6‑26.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑27
.
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6‑26.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑36.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of
View). See “Checking the Fluid Level” under
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6‑26.
J. See Battery on page 6‑39.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment
Fuse Block on page 6‑108.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑35
.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
L4 Engine
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
V6 Engine
If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engine or
below the cross‐hatched area at the tip of the dipstick
for the V6 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
.
Cold Temperature Operation
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43. Change the oil
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset
the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO and reset buttons,
on the left side of the steering wheel, at the same
time to enter the personalization menu. The OIL
LIFE RESET message displays.
3. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the
cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is
properly seated.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
dealer/retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines, the transmission
fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the
transmission is at operating temperature. If you need to
check the transmission fluid level, please take your
vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
3.6LV6 Engine shown, 2.4L L4, 3.5LV6 Engines
similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
WARNING:
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑31.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
.
WARNING:
{
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑27 for more information.
WARNING:
{
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
WARNING:
{
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns.
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
WARNING:
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the mark.
If the level is below the FULL COLD mark, add
additional coolant to bring the level up to the mark.
Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the FULL COLD mark for at least
five minutes.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature gauge as
well as an engine coolant temperature warning light on
your vehicle's instrument panel cluster. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 4‑33 and Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 4‑33.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
If you do decide to lift the hood , make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The
costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6‑33 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
WARNING:
{
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6‑33 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑19
.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
Power Steering Fluid
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
following.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for reservoir location.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gauge will indicate an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km)
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid level
should be between the MIN (Minimum) and MAX
(Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and at the
MAX mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the
MIN mark when the engine is cold or hot, power
steering fluid should be added.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with
V6 engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine have
electric power steering and do not use power steering
fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system, or an
unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
The fluid level should be within the crosshatch area on
the dipstick.
If the fluid is at or below the ADD or MIN mark on the
dipstick, add just enough fluid to bring the level within
the crosshatch area.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
page 7‑11
.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the fluid level
should be between the ADD and HOT marks when the
engine is cold, and at the HOT mark when the engine is
hot. If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine is
cold or hot, power steering fluid should be added.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a
LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑43 for more information.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
reservoir location.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
reservoir.
WARNING:
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑30.
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do
not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
WARNING:
{
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑98
.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new
pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when
applying the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114.
WARNING:
{
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for battery
location.
DANGER:
{
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
WARNING:
{
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑40 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
WARNING:
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle's positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a black
tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for more
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would not
be able to start your vehicle, and the bad
WARNING:
{
grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don't,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as good there, and the
chance of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals to their original positions.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for
vertical aim).
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑47.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING:
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net hooks holding the
trunk trim.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back-up Lamp
3. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12 for more
information.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
2. Remove the push nuts holding the trunk trim.
5. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the lamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
4. Install the new bulb.
7. Pull the bulb from the socket.
8. Install a new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to
install.
5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it
through the fascia opening.
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate
lamp clockwise to reinstall.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp and Taillamp
License Plate Lamp
Turn Signal Lamp
921
168
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning the
two screws counterclockwise.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or
cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3.
To remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
WARNING:
{
.
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. SeeLoading the Vehicle
2. Push the release button.
3. Slide the blade forward.
on page 5‑18
.
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide
forward to remove.
(Continued)
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑12.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has P225/50R18 or
WARNING: (Continued)
P225/50R17 size tires, they are classified
as low‐profile performance tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low‐profile performance tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Notice: If the vehicle has low‐profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
page 6‑57
.
.
.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 6‑58 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Tires
Tire Sidewall Labeling
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as winter
tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
New Tires on page 6‑66.
If you choose to use winter tires:
.
Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
.
Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and
ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed the tire's maximum
speed capability.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑68
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑93 andIf a Tire
page 6‑57
.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
Goes Flat on page 6‑72
.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
page 6‑57
.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18
.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18
.
page 5‑18
.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑57 and Loading
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
the Vehicle on page 5‑18
.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑68
.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18
.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑65
.
Vehicle on page 5‑18
.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
Spare Tire on page 6‑93
.
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
WARNING:
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are under‐inflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
{
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition, and set to
the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for
the front and rear tires, when operating your vehicle at
high-speed conditions. When you end high-speed
driving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑57.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑60 for
additional information.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑40 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑43.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires when they are
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18, for an
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑57.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Your vehicle's TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑63 and Tires on page 6‑48.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the
TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
Notice: Using non‐approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always use the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer/retailer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑73 for information regarding
the inflator kit materials and instructions.
.
.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for
your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑66
.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle's tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The
sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in the
following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the
TPMS learn mode. The horn sounds twice
indicating the TPMS receiver is ready and in
learn mode.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's
air pressure. When increasing the tire's pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall. To decrease the tire's air-pressure use
the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner's sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire's valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to the
tire/wheel position.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑65 for more information.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
on page 7‑3
.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS
learn mode, or if communication with the receiver
stops, or if the time limit has expired, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and start over
beginning with Step 2.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 6‑65
and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑70
.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑60
.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114
.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later,
When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑57 and Loading the Vehicle on
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑80
.
page 5‑18
.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less than
a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑63 for
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you
need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends
that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
information on proper tire rotation.
WARNING:
{
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure
to use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive with
your compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑93
.
page 6‑50 for additional information.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low‐pressure
warning if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low‐pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
WARNING:
{
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
System on page 6‑59
.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18 , for more
information about the Tire and Loading
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires)
as your vehicle's original tires.
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover . Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
WARNING:
{
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑66 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑3 for additional
information.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
WARNING:
{
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑80 for more
information.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING:
{
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re‐adjust or remove the
device if is contacting your vehicle, and do not
spin your wheels.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Tire Chains
WARNING:
{
Do not use tire chains, there is not enough
clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
(Continued)
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING:
{
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, follow the instructions below. To use the tire
sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑73
.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store
a tire.
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an
under inflated tire.
WARNING:
{
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed the
recommended pressure.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the compressor.
The kit includes:
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
A. On/Off Button
D. Pressure Gauge
B. Selector Switch
(Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
E. Air Only Hose (Black)
F. Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
C. Pressure Relief
Button
G. Power Plug
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑72. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑80.
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated
environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the
tire faster.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the
inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) clockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The pressure gauge (D) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly
drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with
air only.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gauge (D). The
recommended inflation pressure can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑57.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
The pressure gauge (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
pressure reading. The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure is reached.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (G) back in their original location.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal
the tire. See Roadside Assistance Program on
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister and place
it in a highly visible
location. The label is a
reminder not to exceed
55 mph (90 km/h) until
the damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
page 8‑7
.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister and sealant/
air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with local state codes and practices.
17. Return the equipment to its original storage
location in the vehicle.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire
sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer/retailer within a 100 miles
(161 km) of driving to have the tire repaired or
replaced.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto the tire valve
stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) counterclockwise to
the Air Only position.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑72
.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the
compressor on.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑80.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (E) and the power
plug (G).
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gauge (D). The
recommended inflation pressure can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑57.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
The pressure gauge (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (E) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
1. Remove the plastic cover.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from the canister (A).
3. Pull up on the canister (A) to remove it.
14. Replace the air only hose (E) and the power plug
(G) and cord back in its original location.
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
4. Replace with a new canister which is available
from your dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the
trunk.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Lift the cover.
WARNING:
{
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire
sealant and compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the
steps.
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12 for more
information.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 6‑93 for more information.
4. Remove the wing nut holding the jack in place.
5. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Changing Tools
1. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to loosen
wheel wrench.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A)
and jack (B).
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑80.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that has
plastic wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps.
You might need to use the wheel wrench to loosen
them. Do not pry off wheel covers or center caps
that have plastic wheel nut caps.
3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the
wheel to locate the wheel nuts.
If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without
plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry on the edge of
the plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel
to locate the wheel nuts.
3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by
pressing the button and pulling on the end of the
wrench. You must do this before using the wheel
wrench.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do
not remove them yet.
5. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest
the flat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head is
touching the jacking flange under the body. Do not
place the jack under a body panel.
6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so
there is enough room for the compact spare tire
to fit.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑80
.
9. Remove the flat tire.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
11. Install the compact spare tire.
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or with
the wrench until the wheel is held against the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
WARNING:
{
sequence, as shown,
with the wheel wrench.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑114 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑114 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut
caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools
WARNING:
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire
compartment:
3. Collapse the wrench using the same button used
to extend it.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
4. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the
side of the jack.
2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellow sleeve)
from the jack and remove the center cap from the
wheel.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the jack to the
height shown and lock
the wrench onto
the jack.
6. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor, making
sure it contacts the bolt. Thread the jack retainer
nut until it contacts the jack.
7. With the valve stem up, place the tire on the
compartment floor with the rear of the tire under
the trim panel. The tire may not lay completely flat.
8. Line up the bolt with the wheel center.
9. With the yellow cap in place to prevent the wheel
from being scratched, screw the bolt extension
onto the bolt through the wheel center hole.
10. Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension.
11. Secure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Wing Nut
C. Extension
D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)
E. Nut
F. Jack
G. Bolt
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑93
.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
WARNING:
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Collapse the wrench using the same button used
to extend it.
3. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the
side of the jack.
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Raise the jack to the
height shown and lock
the wrench onto
Compact Spare Tire
WARNING:
the jack.
{
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
5. Place the jack in the spare tire well. Make sure the
stow bolt goes through the hole in the center of the
wrench on the jack, with the base of the jack
towards the front of the vehicle. Turn the jack
retainer nut until it firmly contacts the wrench. Do
not over tighten.
If this vehicle has a compact spare tire it was fully
inflated when the vehicle was new, however, it can lose
air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
6. Place the compact spare into the tire compartment
with the stow bolt going through the center hole of
the wheel.
7. Turn the spare tire retainer nut until it firmly
contacts the wheel. Do not over tighten.
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is
correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. The
vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and
its wheel together.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
the compact spare.
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leather
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use
spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
WARNING:
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11
.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
page 6‑98
.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Aluminum Wheels
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Tires
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and
replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114 for the
vehicle's engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle
and the damage would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑72 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑73
.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in the
center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses from
the fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
instrument panel near the floor on the passenger side of
the vehicle.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features
listed.
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
POWER
MIRRORS
Usage
Fuses
Usage
IGN SENSOR
Ignition Switch
Power Mirrors
STRG WHL
ILLUM
Steering Wheel Illumination
EPS
Electronic Power Steering
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
NOT
INSTALLED
RUN/CRANK
HVAC
Not Used
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay
RADIO
Audio System
Interior Lamps
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
CLUSTER/
THEFT
Instrument Panel Cluster, Theft
Deterrent System
OnStar®
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
ONSTAR
NOT
INSTALLED
POWER
WINDOWS
Not Used
Power Windows
AIRBAG (IGN)
Airbag (Ignition)
HVAC
CTRL (IGN)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(Battery)
HVAC
CTRL (BATT)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
HVAC BLOWER
DOOR LOCK
PEDAL
Not Used
Door Locks
WIPER SW
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
ROOF/
HEAT SEAT
Sunroof, Heated Seat
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
features listed.
Fuses
Usage
NOT
Not Used
Not Used
INSTALLED
NOT
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
INSTALLED
AIRBAG (BATT) Airbag (Battery)
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Air Conditioner Clutch
Electronic Throttle Control
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
Transmission Control Module
Ignition 1
4
5
6
Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)
Emission
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
7
Usage
Left Headlamp Low-Beam
Horn
Fuses
25
Usage
Body Control Module 2
Starter
8
26
9
Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Front Fog Lamps
41
Electric Power Steering
Transmission Control Module Battery
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
42
Left Headlamp High-Beam
Right Headlamp High-Beam
Engine Control Module BATT
Windshield Wiper
Ignition Module (LZ4, LZE, LE9 &
LE5); Injectors, Ignition Coils
Odd (LY7)
43
Injectors (LZ4, LZE, LE9 & LE5);
Injectors, Ignition Coils Even (LY7)
44
45
Antilock Brake System (IGN 1)
Engine Control Module IGN 1
Cooling Fan 1
Post Cat 02 Sensor Heaters (LY7,
LZ4 & LZE)
46
47
50
51
52
54
55
56
Daytime Running Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Driver Power Window
Not Used
Cooling Fan 2
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Blower
19
20
21
22
23
24
Body Control Module 1
AIR Solenoid
Body Control Module Run/Crank
Rear Electrical Center 1
Rear Electrical Center 2
Antilock Brake System
Regulated Voltage Control
DC/AC Inverter
Antilock Brake System BATT
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Relays
28
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
29
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
30
31
Starter
32
Run/Crank, Ignition
Powertrain
33
34
Air Conditioning Clutch
High Beam
35
36
Front Fog Lamps
Horn
37
38
Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wiper 1
Windshield Wiper 2
Daytime Running Lamps
Stoplamps
39
40
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the trunk
panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
48
49
53
AIR Solenoid
Diodes
Usage
27
Wiper
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Passenger Seat Controls
Driver Seat Controls
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
Not Used
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming
6
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
7
Usage
Fuses
24
Usage
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Heated Mirrors
Fuel Pump
8
25
9
Relays
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sunroof Controls
Not Used
26
Rear Window Defogger
Park Lamps
Not Used
27
Not Used
28
Audio Amplifier
Heated Seat Controls
Not Used
29
Not Used
30
Not Used
31
Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
XM™ Satellite Radio, UGDO
16
32
Not Used
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
33
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
34
Not Used
35
36
Not Used
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Not Used
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
Cargo Lamp
37
Trunk Release
Rear Defog
38 (Diode)
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission*
Automatic Transmission 4-Speed (Bottom Pan Removal)
Automatic Transmission 6-Speed (Drain and Refill)
Cooling System
6.6 L
5.0 L
7.0 qt
5.3 qt
2.4L L4 Engine
7.1 L
9.2 L
7.5 qt
9.7 qt
3.5L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine
4.7 L
3.8 L
5.0 qt
4.0 qt
3.5L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
5.2 L
5.5 qt
Fuel Tank
61.7 L
140 Y
16.3 gal
100 lb ft
Wheel Nut Torque
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6‑26 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
Transmission
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.10 mm (0.044 in)
B
0
2.4L L4 Engine
3.5L V6 Engine
3.5L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
K
N
7
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
6-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
Maintenance Schedule
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑6
.
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer/retailer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
WARNING:
{
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑4.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more
frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At your dealer/retailer, you can be certain that you will
receive the highest level of service available. Your
dealer/retailer has specially trained service technicians,
uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up to date
tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Oil Soon Message
Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑19. An Emission Control Service.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑12. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within
the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate
the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and the oil life system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life
system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within
5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑22.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑63.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
When the Change Oil Soon message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required. The
services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑57
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑63.
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
engine oil was changed.
page 6‑63
.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
Oil Soon message has displayed or since the last
service.
.
.
Maintenance I
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑24.
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑19. An Emission Control Service.
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑27
.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
folding seat hardware, and rear compartment
hinges lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11. More frequent
lubrication may be required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
makes them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Maintenance II
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑74.
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and
wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑100. Worn
or damaged wiper blade replacement. See
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑24.
page 6‑48
.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once a Year
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
page 6‑19
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑27
.
.
.
.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑35.
page 7‑9
.
.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑9.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑57
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑63.
page 6‑26
.
.
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort,
or binding. Replace if needed.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit, check the sealant expiration date printed on
the instruction label of the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑73.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
page 6‑26
.
.
Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑24.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑26.
.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑27. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑31.
on page 3‑31
.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability: With
.
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when
the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Power GM Power Steering Fluid
Steering System (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
(if equipped)
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission
Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Engine Oil
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
on page 6‑19
.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 109435474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
page 6‑27
.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in
Canada 88862807).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Part Numbers
ACDelco Part Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine
3.5L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Spark Plugs
22676970
A1627C
12605566
19210285
89017524
PF457G
PF61
PF48
2.4L L4 Engine
3.5L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Wiper Blades
12625058
12591131
12597464
41-103
41-100
41-990
Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm)
25800624
25800623
—
—
Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm)
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6L V6 Engine
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-17
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will
be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That
is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
.
and more
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
.
service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links:
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at
its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Roadside Assistance Program
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calling for Assistance
Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
.
Telephone number of your location
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
.
Description of the problem
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Services Provided
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
.
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation Program
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one
of the following:
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Shuttle Service
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This
includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service within
reasonable time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if
there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it
is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party's insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature
settings.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency Statement
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Navigation System
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . 4-86
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Adjustment
Chime Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-64
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Antenna
Backglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
i - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25, 3-28
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
C
B
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
California
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Brake
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Check
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
i - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Child Restraints
Climate Control Systems
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Engine Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
i - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving (cont.)
D
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Door
Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DIC Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Driving
E
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . .6-104
Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
i - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Engine
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
i - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
H
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps Off in Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
High-Speed Operation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Hood
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
i - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Instrument Panel
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Lift Seat, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Lighting
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
i - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
M
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Locks
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Mirrors
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Lumbar
Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
N
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
i - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
P
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Off-Road
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Park
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Oil
Headlamps Off in Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Operation, Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . 3-39
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Outlets
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-4
Phone
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Outside
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . 6-33
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Lift Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
i - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Radios
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
i - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Roof
Seats
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Lift Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Securing a Child Restraint
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
S
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Security
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
i - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Spare Tire
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Taillamps
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Split Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Driver Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . 6-80
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Telescopic Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
i - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73, 6-80
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . 3-25, 3-28
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Vehicle Personalization
DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
i - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield
W
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
i - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|